2015 Dodge Charger Owner Manual

2015 Charger
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Charger
FCA US LLC
15D481-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- improvements to its products without imposing any
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
portation. ously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
your satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles. DODGE is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various contains the information you desire.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
tions and recommendations in this manual will help illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it contains a complete listing of all subjects.
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .18 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .26 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .57
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .94
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
push to operate the ignition.
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the 1 — OFF
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in 2
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
into the lock cylinders with either side up. formation.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle. 2
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicle. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with cause serious injury or death.
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is CAUTION!
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
dren should be warned not to touch the parking remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or vehicle unattended.
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
(Continued)
SENTRY KEY addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, engine being shut off after two seconds.
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro- as possible by an authorized dealer.
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank CAUTION!
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the problems and loss of security protection.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
authorized dealer. 2
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it Customer Key Programming
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
General Information
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
tended. and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, subject to the following conditions:
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF • This device may not cause harmful interference.
position.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- received, including interference that may cause unde-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a sired operation.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Rearming Of The System
by the party responsible for compliance could void the If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
user’s authority to operate the equipment. disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Security Alarm will rearm itself.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While To Arm The System
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro- 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF”
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, And Operating⬙ for further information).
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster • Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
will flash.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ 2
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information). NOTE:
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
(RKE) transmitter. the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
To Disarm The System
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods: The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
Entry (RKE) transmitter. ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information. disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
NOTE:
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
Security System Manual Override
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
outside mirrors (if equipped). up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice 2
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the Sound Horn With Lock
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Headlight Illumination On Approach turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel” for further information.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Using The Panic Alarm • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted 2
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless performed at an authorized dealer.
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Transmitter Battery Replacement
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater. The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
horn will remain on.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
other hand. seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter

Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over • This device must accept any interference received,
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a including interference that may cause undesired op-
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the eration.
2
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
with rubbing alcohol. distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as the battery is a minimum of three years.
shown in step #2 for removal. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry engine will remote start:
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
• Shift lever in PARK
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Doors closed
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Hood closed
NOTE:
• Hazard switch off
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range. • RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
NOTE:
WARNING!
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or then shut down 10 seconds later. 2
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- Remote Start mode.
jury or death when inhaled. • For security, power window and power sunroof op-
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start in the Remote Start mode.
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death. • The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
To Enter Remote Start Mode activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice
Push and release the REMOTE START button on (or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights third cycle.
will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if pro-
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Vehicle Go™ feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
you push the START button.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Cancel Remote Start
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote occur:
Start request.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the • Low Fuel Light turns on.
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the • The hood is opened.
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, • The hazard switch is pushed.
push and release the START/STOP button. • The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
DOOR LOCKS If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
Manual Door Locks
not inside the vehicle before closing the door. 2
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside WARNING!
door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. • For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob

WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
Power Door Locks
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents power door locks if: 2
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and abled.
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime 2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped PARK.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. 3. The driver door is opened.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
Please see your authorized dealer for service. tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
2
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
WARNING! “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, will arm the
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
door is unlocked.
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
To Unlock From The Passenger Side: FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle. 2
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when transmitter while a door is ajar.
the door is unlocked.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger handle while a door is ajar.
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is ajar.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the Trunk Button
door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
To Enter The Trunk Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
of the deck lid.
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door 2
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the Power Window Switches
vehicle’s interior door panel.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
WINDOWS trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
Power Windows is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the AUTO-Down Feature
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
The driver door power window switch and some model
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- 2
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
down feature. Push the window switch to the second
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
WARNING! To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
window to stop.
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a To stop the window from going all the way down during
location accessible to children, and do not leave the the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en- Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
trapped by the windows while operating the power the window will go up automatically.
window switches. Such entrapment may result in To stop the window from going all the way up during the
serious injury or death. AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop. may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE: 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger detent to open the window completely and continue
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the after the window is fully open.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING! The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
window before closing. push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
push and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position). pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the 2
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Window Lockout Switch

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
button will operate. indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position , the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Release Button

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
WARNING! nism.
2
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release

As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. Trunk Emergency Internal Release
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Seat Belt Systems
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
• Child Restraints
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
Important Safety Precautions dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
Please pay close attention to the information in this positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible. them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: child restraint to make sure that you are using it
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride properly.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
WARNING!
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of 2
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate. Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your facing child restraint.
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space with a rear seat.
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured. Seat Belt Systems
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the
sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times. illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while
(BeltAlert) traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver will provide both audio and visual notification.
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out- The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
WARNING!
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 2
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
Lap/Shoulder Belts • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
lap/shoulder belts. led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul- vehicle are buckled up properly.
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
belts. the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
using a seat belt properly. belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
injuries in a collision much worse. You might a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
safe, too. it fixed.
• Two people should never be belted into a single • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
another in a collision, hurting one another badly. ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
than one person, no matter what their size. buckle nearest you.
(Continued) (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far you from injury during a collision. You are more 2
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
your seat belt snugly. wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. are meant to be used together.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
bones will take the force in a collision. the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will the latch plate.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
shoulder belt. and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward 2
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
Adjustable Anchorage position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you pant, it must be removed.
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
WARNING!
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
required in order to properly fit the original seat abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender the force if there is a collision.
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge Seat Belt Pretensioner
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
recommended seating positions. Remove and store work for all size occupants, including those in child
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or 2
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratch-
WARNING!
eting sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto- facing child restraint.
matically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic with a rear seat.
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking child restraints that have a harness for restraining 2
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) the child.
locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING! Air Bag System Components
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- system components:
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
dures in the Service Manual. • Air Bag Warning Light
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Steering Wheel and Column
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain • Instrument Panel
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is • Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
(Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The Bag
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides 2
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
could cause serious injury, including death. Air determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably which may receive information from the front impact
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or sensors or other system components.
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- output is used for more severe collisions.
facing child restraint. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
with a rear seat. inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
Advanced Front Air Bags. with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
WARNING! ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
only when the air bags are inflating.
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
(Continued)
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while 2
severe initial deceleration. helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Knee Impact Bolsters
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
have deployed. pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Air Bags.
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag. WARNING!
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large bolsters in any way.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
Advanced Front Air Bags. bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right radios, etc.
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the 2
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
WARNING!
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure. (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win- high enough to block the deployment of the
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not are located should remain free from any obstruc-
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in tions.
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
windows in certain rollover or side impact events. nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de- help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air 2
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
Side Air Bags should have deployed. that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
WARNING!
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously against the door or window. Sit upright in the
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should center of the seat.
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an ment could cause you to be severely injured or
infant or child restraint. killed.
(Continued)
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
though you have Side Air Bags. compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Front Air Bags deploy.
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Impacts
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
determining the appropriate response to impact events. the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover or all of the following may occur:
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions 2
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten- rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
experiences a near rollover event. doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
If A Deployment Occurs
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
immediately after deployment. inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
the air bag system. doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you. remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING! whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme- • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
System serviced as well. tion.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
NOTE:
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, turned to the “OFF” position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
System Reset Procedure The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed 2
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
WARNING!
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
first turned to the ON/RUN position. as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
eight-second interval. service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instru-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag ment panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
system immediately. stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime
will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving have an authorized modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards. 2
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional
information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
manual. works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
WARNING! Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system air bag system service. If your seat, including your
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
protect you. Do not modify the components or seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as: crash investigation.
How various systems in your vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the
tor and/or brake pedal vehicle or the EDR.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all great that you could not hold the child, no matter
times, including babies and children. how strong you are. The child and others could be 2
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
province, requires that small children ride in proper should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it. There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
the rear seats rather than in the front. instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
WARNING! restraint.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has NOTE:
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
call 1–866–732–8243.
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Age straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
younger and who have not vertible Child Restraint, facing
reached the height or weight limits rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
of their child restraint hicle
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Age straint
Small Children Children who are at least two Forward-Facing Child Restraint 2
years old or who have out-grown with a five-point Harness, facing
the height or weight limit of their forward in the rear seat of the ve-
rear-facing child restraint hicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
their forward-facing child restraint, the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
but are too small to properly fit rear seat of the vehicle
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
Restraints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
It is recommended for children from birth until they with a rear seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or Older Children And Child Restraints
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
carrier but are still less than at least two years old. tion are for children who are over two years old or who
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
child seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint. 2
All children whose weight or height is above the • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
in the vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
WARNING! loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a serious personal injury.
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
belt alone: move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of correctly.
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front WARNING!
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
way back?
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder will not protect a child properly, which may result in
between their neck and arm? serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
correctly.
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below 2
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
Restraint System equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
child restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your 2
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. all child restraint systems will be installed as described 2
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or belt, following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
position. to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
WARNING! tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing anchorages.
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
seating position. For some second row seats, you may rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and turer’s instructions.
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
for the child seat. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
ing position. When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child used by other occupants or being used to secure child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
tions to attach a tether anchor. with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock Belt
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 2
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
them. (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
WARNING! necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted ditional information on ALR.
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended 2
forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
the seat belt against the belt path of the position with an ALR retractor.
child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor. tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position, 2
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
in any direction. proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If 1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
route the tether strap under the head restraint and 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 2
WARNING! the center tether anchorage located in the panel be-
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
increased head motion and possible injury to the 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
child. Use only the anchorage position directly restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap. Transporting Pets
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
opening between the seatbacks as you remove injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
slack in the strap. a collision.
Center Tether Attachment Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
or 90 km/h) are desirable. in the engine or damage may result.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
be detrimental and should be avoided. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
the break in period. Add oil as required.
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING! 2
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing
WARNING! it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison
you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may confined areas any longer than needed to move
cause serious injury or death. your vehicle in or out of the area.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
injured or killed. at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
using a seat belt properly. blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Vehicle
system.
Seat Belts
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
system.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
The light should come on and remain on for vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area 2
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
not lit during starting, see your authorized or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized WARNING!
dealer.
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
Defroster vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place sonal injury.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to • Always make sure that floor mats are properly
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your attached to the floor mat fasteners.
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- • Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
able. ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor Tires
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
been removed for cleaning. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel- Lights
erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or panel.
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of Door Latches
control of the vehicle. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline 2
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .108 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light — ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .116
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .130 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .133 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .147
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .140
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles . . . . . . . .159
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 3
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .161
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .162
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .153
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .157 䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .165
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .181
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .186
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .187
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .174
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .190
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .175
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .199
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With ▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .216
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .202 3
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .217
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .218
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .205
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .223
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .225
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .226 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .230 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40 䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .247
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare 3
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned Automatic Dimming Mirror
on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- a 9-1-1 button.
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information. 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
ASSIST Call NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
to any one of the following support centers:
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be con- Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
operator:
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. 3
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
• The vehicle brand. tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. WARNING!

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
additional help is needed.
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator immediately and move to a safe location.
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 wireless and GPS signal reception, which can pre-
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you vent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
(Continued)

Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly. could cause the air bag system to fail when you
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi- need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket is not there to help protect you.
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a 9-1-1 Call System Limitations
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, Call system capabilities.
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT- If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING following may occur at the time the malfunction is
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
(Continued)
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.” send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone dealer service the ORC system immediately. 3
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
WARNING! beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you limited to, the following factors:
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized • Delayed accessories mode is active.
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. • The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
if a malfunction in any part of the system is • The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- damaged during a crash.
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
(Continued)
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals General Information
are unavailable or obstructed.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. this device must accept any interference received, includ-
• Wireless network congestion. ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Weather.
CAUTION!
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle mirror clean.
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function Outside Mirrors
properly. To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Equipped
lane next to your vehicle. The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
WARNING! by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- 3
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away mirror adjusts.
than they really are. Relying too much on your Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
the doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped Power Mirrors
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the door trim panel.
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
Power Mirror Control
formation.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
the mirror that you want to adjust. feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
3
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the
extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is
located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Slide-On-Rod Feature
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to to let the driver know that the system is operational.
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode 3
rear/front/side of the vehicle. when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
contamination so that the BSM system can function
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
NOTE: per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
tection zones. located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning on such objects. This is normal operation and your
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed vehicle does not require service.
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

RCP Detection Zones
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver. situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
system will not be able to alert the driver. Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING! system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
death. priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an Blind Spot Alert Off
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
tected object are present on the same side at the same systems.
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
be reduced. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
NOTE:
used.
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
General Information
system, the radio volume is reduced.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
the appropriate visual alert only.
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: SEATS
1. The device may not cause harmful interference. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- 3
WARNING!
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
other than an authorized service facility could void outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
authorization to use this equipment. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down,
forward or rearward.
Power Seat Switches

1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
when the desired position has been reached. the switch when the desired position is reached. 3
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

WARNING!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
switch when the desired position is reached. control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat seat belt.
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached. (Continued)
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. support.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power Power Lumbar Switch
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
seatbacks. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting 3
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated in a seat that has been overheated could cause
using the Uconnect® System. serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
WARNING!
Front Heated Seats
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
even at low temperatures, especially if used for use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
long periods of time. LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
(Continued)
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
the LO setting ON.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn heated seats can be programed to come on during a
the heating elements OFF. remote start.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min- system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
Rear Heated Seats
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes. On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
NOTE: seats are located on the rear of the center console. There
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
two to five minutes. passengers to operate the seats independently.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
operate. indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button once to select HI-level system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
heating. proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
• Push the heated seat button a second time to select
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
LO-level heating.
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. 3
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
the heating elements OFF.
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
NOTE:
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
two to five minutes. help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
HI and LO.
operate.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the screen.
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. Manual Seats — If Equipped
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
choose LO. The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Using
turn the ventilated seat OFF. body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be 3
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
Manual Recline Lever
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraints Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
WARNING! The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- return to their normal position see your authorized
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- dealer immediately.
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
event of a collision. push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to can go then push the release button and the adjustment
gain additional clearance to the back of your head. button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
WARNING!
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely 3
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
Adjustment Button
event of a collision and could result in serious
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear
head restraints requires removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Folding Rear Seat After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
3
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loop
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
position) should not be used as a play area by tions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans-
be seated and using the proper restraint system. mitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Feature
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
button, which is used to activate the memory save
existing profile from memory.
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. To create a new memory profile, perform the following: 3
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY
button 1 or 2. The Drivers Information Display (DID)
will display which memory position has been set.
Memory Seat Switches
NOTE: To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 1. Place the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
memory profile.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry the system to complete the memory recall before
Transmitter To Memory” in this section. continuing to Step 3.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
Transmitter To Memory refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal Settings Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the Drivers Infor-
mation Display (DID).
Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect® system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding 4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. mitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked from To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY
your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
3
Memory Position Recall memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
position 2.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the Drivers Informa- A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
tion Display (DID). buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, adjustable
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
memory position 1.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
position 1.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
vehicle.
or Easy Entry.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety catch lever to the left.
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel. 3
Safety Catch Lever Location

4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Headlight Switch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should The headlight switch is located on the left side of
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the instrument panel. This switch controls the
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight 3
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
Headlight Switch will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Automatic Headlights Only) Equipped
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature high beam control through the use of a digital camera
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by specific light and automatically switches from high beams
this feature. to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE:
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights To Deactivate
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
operation of low beams).
lens will cause the system to function improperly. 3
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
system.
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized Headlight Time Delay
dealer.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
To Activate for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position. To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
ON again, the system will cancel the delay. vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
Lights-On Reminder
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
information. is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight lights or the low beam headlights and push the
switch. headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch. 3
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch

Multifunction Lever Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of
three times then automatically turn off. the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. 3
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The Courtesy Lights
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
pushed. second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light — If Equipped Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to 3
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
located on the left side of the instrument panel. the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Dome Light Position WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
position. the left side of the steering column. 3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Intermittent Wiper System
CAUTION!
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There is left in any position other than off.
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
Wiper Operation • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper off position. If the windshield wiper control is
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
settings for high-speed wiper operation. position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as windshield with the defroster before and during
washer spray is desired. windshield washer use. 3
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume This feature utilizes a heating element to thaw out any ice
the intermittent interval previously selected. buildup that could occur at the outlets or within the
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is windshield washer nozzles. To activate, push the rear
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles window defroster button. When the rear window de-
and then turn off. froster times out, the heating element will also shut off. If
required, to reactivate the heated nozzles push the rear
WARNING! window defroster button as needed.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
NOTE: The heated washer nozzles only apply heat to the Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
nozzle outlets to prevent them from freezing and allow Automatic Headlights Only)
the nozzles to dispense windshield washer fluid. Always When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
remove any buildup of snow or ice in front of the washer after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
nozzles as this will prevent the windshield washer fluid placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
from reaching the windshield. is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
Mist Feature when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
continue to operate until you release the multifunction “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
lever. tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped NOTE:
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly 3
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
shield.
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less following conditions:
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
OFF position when not using the system.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
located below the steering wheel at the end of the the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
steering column. push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause 3
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
lever on the steering column.
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre- wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80
in this section. minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steer-
ing wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the
WARNING! steering wheel is already warm.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. The heated steering wheel control button is located within
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to • Press the heated steering wheel button once to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or turn the heating element ON.
death.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. wheel covers of any type and material. This may 3
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelera-
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tor pedals to move toward or away from the driver to
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise provide improved position with the steering wheel.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
cushion side shield.
used for long periods.
(Continued)
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Dis-
play (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Adjustable Pedals Switch
NOTE:
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle). • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
WARNING!
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi- You could lose control and have an accident. Always
tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. 3
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage (40 km/h).
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the right side of the steering wheel.
adjustable pedal’s path.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
Electronic Speed Control Buttons is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
3 — RESUME is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Deactivate
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. out erasing the set speed from memory. 3
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
button and release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH To Vary The Speed Setting
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A To Increase Speed
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
speed is set. crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- continue to increase until the button is released, then
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. the new set speed will be established.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
U.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
button results in an increase of 1 mph. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established. U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
the new set speed will be established. moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h) On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed 3
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
WARNING!
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
the new set speed will be established. system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
To Accelerate For Passing could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
EQUIPPED apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected. • The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
WARNING! and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a 3
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
system. It is not a substitute for active driving tions into account, and may be limited upon
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil- adverse sight distance conditions.
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather • Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to distance warnings.
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
conditions. Your complete attention is always re- following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
quired while driving to maintain safe control of for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
result in a collision and death or serious personal the ACC system will display a message that the
injury. system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a 1
2
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
constant speed. 3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation 6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the 8 — CANCEL
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set. 3
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h). • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h). • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the brakes are overheated.
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC • When the driver door is open.
Ready.”
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” • ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
WARNING!
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. speed. If this occurs: 3
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it. • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID speed will only be determined by the position of the
will display the set speed. accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle The following conditions cancel the system:
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Turn Off
Drive position. The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- memory if:
tem (ESC/TCS) activates. • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
• The vehicle parking brake is applied. ON/OFF button is pushed.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds. • The ignition is turned off.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds. • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
NOTE:
To Resume
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle

in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
NOTE: To Vary The Speed Setting
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two To Increase Speed
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply pushing the SET + button.
3
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
WARNING! speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
The Resume function should only be used if traffic U.S. Speed (mph)
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
death or serious personal injury. continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h) The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the U.S. Speed (mph)
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
in the DID.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
To Decrease Speed button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by flected in the DID.
pushing the SET - button. Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
flected in the DID. may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main- 3
NOTE:
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed exceeds normal range (overheated).
of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after com-
ing to a full stop.
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set- • The distance setting is changed.
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
ACC Activation).
(shorter).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
necessary.
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indica-
tor” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati- NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
cally to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set ACC system applies the brakes.
speed.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
speed.
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of capacity.
the sensor.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver 3
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
Brake Alert
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for need for any driver action.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
the brakes autonomously. seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
this moment. DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a information it displays depends on ACC system status.
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display the following displays in the DID:
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver inter-
vention will be required at this moment. Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
WARNING! tive Cruise Control Off.”
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
these warnings can result in a collision and death or not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
serious personal injury. Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
ACC SET Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” 3
instrument cluster. warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
• System Cancel
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• Driver Override dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
• System Off
system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• ACC Unavailable Warning message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
five seconds of no ACC display activity
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
this warning may temporarily occur. require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should malfunction.
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
glass. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/FCW 3
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
your authorized dealer.
system will have degraded performance.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
ACC/FCW operation.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate temporarily occur.
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func-
examine the windshield and the camera located on the tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your autho-
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
rized dealer.
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer. intervene.
Service ACC/FCW Warning Towing A Trailer
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavail-
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
Offset Driving Turns And Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume 3
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
accelerate unexpectedly. system functionality.
Offset Driving Condition Example

NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC 3
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) 3
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference. the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
eration of the device. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
authorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
WARNING!
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity speed control is SET.
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound To Vary The Speed Setting
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the To Increase Speed
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is button.
selected.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
To Set A Desired Speed instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
U.S. Speed (mph)
in the DID display.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph 3
To Decrease Speed
button results in an increase of 1 mph. When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
in the DID display. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
U.S. Speed (mph)
button results in an increase of 1 km/h. • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will To Cancel
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
flected in the DID display. memory:
Metric Speed (km/h) • The brake pedal is applied.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h • The CANCEL button is pushed.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the • The vehicle parking brake is applied.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
flected in the DID display. heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
20 mph (32 km/h). Operation
3
To Turn Off The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
memory if: visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
ON/OFF button is pushed. to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
• The ignition is turned off. mitigate the potential collision.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
pushed. looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward colli-
sion. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation FCW Message
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the brakes. message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than every type of potential collision. The driver has the 3
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
normal FCW activation and functionality. this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings.
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on). The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
off). ment Panel” for further information.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
in front of you. to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
avoid a possible collision.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE: FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
fully available. Once the condition that limited the sys-
driver after ignition shut down.
tem performance is no longer present, the system will
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as return to its full performance state. If the problem per- 3
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the sists, see your authorized dealer.
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
Service FCW Warning
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed. If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens. • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
FCW Limited Warning This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- the system checked by an authorized dealer.
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
LaneSense Operation
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
within the lane boundaries.
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
When both lane markings are detected and the driver vided.
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
does not return their hands to the wheel.
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF 7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”. Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
below the Uconnect® display. 3
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
DID.
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
3
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
steering wheel will turn to the right. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings: 3
1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Push the “Settings” button.
3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator) warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar alization settings.
behavior for a right lane departure. NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
traction control system, electronic stability control,
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
forward collision warning, etc.)
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF 6 mph (9 km/h).
EQUIPPED ParkSense® Sensors
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
and audible indications of the distance between the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys- obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
this system and recommendations. direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or tion of the obstacle.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® Warning Display ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect® will turn ON indicating the system status.
System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand- The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200- (150- (120- (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in 150 cm) 120 cm) 100 cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center center center
(for rear only) only) only)
center
only)
Arc — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Rear ing
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200- (150- (120- (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in 150 cm) 120 cm) 100 cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm) 3
Arc — Cen- None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ter Rear ing ing
Arc — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Right Rear ing
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® When the ParkSense® system is disabled, the
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Informa-
the Uconnect® display.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense®
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If
the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is dis-
abled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
System SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the 3
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
age the sensors.
Information Display (DID) will display the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions • ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio when
it is sounding an audio tone.
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ating properly.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense® or render the obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
system temporarily unavailable. a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instru-
ment cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five • Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you 12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
cycle the ignition. to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
and ParkSense® is turned off, the Driver Information
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message
Display (DID).
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check 3
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
the sensors will not be detected when they are in or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
close proximity. for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time so can result in serious injury or death.
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
EQUIPPED feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
position.
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. last touchscreen appears again.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro- image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
grammable modes of operation that may be selected projected backup path based on the steering wheel
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® position.
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 3
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- path.
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in
must continue to pay attention while backing up. time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. 3
Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Front Map/Reading Lights
Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
second time. ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt 3
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manu-
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
indicator flashes. identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
Training The Garage Door Opener lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
1 — Door Opener from slow to rapid.
2 — Training Button
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices (Rolling Code)
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two not release the button.
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- steps.
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training. Programming A Non-Rolling Code
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT before 1995.
erase the channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator erase the channels.
light in view.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button. follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes not release the button.
from slow to rapid. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light. remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
several seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- fully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
time-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage and observe the indicator light.
door or gate motor. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLink®
programming, plug it back in at this time. To operate, push and release the programmed
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
(Canadian/Gate Operator) programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- 3
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
follow these steps:
also be used at any time.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Security
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do in your vehicle.
not release the button.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
3. Without releasing the button proceed with seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
follow all remaining steps. erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
WARNING!
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions: • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit- while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
ter. can cause serious injury or death.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener • Your motorized door or gate will open and close
to complete the training for a Rolling Code. while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
remember to plug it back in?
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at required by Federal safety standards. This includes
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
3
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
Power Sunroof Switch
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Injury may result.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in Opening Sunroof — Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
by the power sunroof while operating the power second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
serious injury or death. open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and closed condition until the switch is pushed and held 3
held rearward again. forward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express Pinch Protect Feature
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
the sunroof. release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express Wind Buffeting
Push and release the Vent button within one half secondWind buffeting can be described as the perception of
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This ispressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Sunshade Operation
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
open. window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power
NOTE:
outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
• The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to 3
placed to the Off position. Opening either front door the battery and powered at all times.
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS discharge.
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt knob and element must be used.
(10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
used to power cellular phones, small electronics and on the center stack of the instrument panel.
other low powered electrical accessories. The power
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Center Console Power Outlet
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
result. the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
will need to be replaced. console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”. 3
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet/
shock and failure.
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Center Console Power Outlet/Media Hub
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • After the use of high power draw accessories or
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
prevent the engine from starting. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- power outlet can cause damage.
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. 3
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
Retractable Cover
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el- On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
bows. a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder

STORAGE Console Features
Glove Compartment There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift
lever.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Two separate storage compartments are also located 3
underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable Door Storage
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on The door panels contain storage areas.
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Front Door Trim Storage
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
WARNING!
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- 3
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
nearly-flat extension of the load floor. erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the position) should not be used as a play area by
seatback above the seat strap. children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
WARNING!
Rear Window Defroster
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- The rear window defroster button is located on
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
vehicle: rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos- when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
sible. defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight push the button a second time.
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
the heating elements: conditions.
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear 3
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after to complete depending on road surface conditions.
soaking with warm water. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
window cleaners on the interior surface of the vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .252 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .254 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .255 ▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .264
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .324
▫ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Performance Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . .333
▫ DID Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .342
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .344 ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — ▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .360
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .381
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Glove Box

2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Power Outlet
3 — Radio Controls — If Equipped 8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
4 — Uconnect® System 9 — Trunk Release Button
5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 10 — Headlight Switch
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L and 5.7L

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 3. Brake Warning Light
1. Tachometer This light monitors various brake functions,
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible including brake fluid level and parking brake
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear application. If the brake light turns on, it may
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with 4
the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
redline = 6400 RPM. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
2. High Beam Indicator
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
This indicator will turn on when the high beam hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever remain on until the condition has been corrected.
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
high beam.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
the brake fluid level checked.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
placing the ignition from the OFF position to the ON/
sary.
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
WARNING! the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will by an authorized dealer.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. applied with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4. Air Bag Warning Light driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 4
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
Vehicle” for further information.
the odometer must be reset at zero.
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Area
The DID features an interactive display. For further
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).”
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
vidual trip mileage.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- lights or headlights are turned on.
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
lights are on.
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should low tire pressure telltale.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tires). malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
CAUTION!
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. The TPMS has been optimized for the original
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure warning have been established for the tire size
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or tion or sensor damage may result when using re- 4
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the placement equipment that is not of the same size,
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
to continue to function properly. market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
Light — If Equipped light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
trol (ESC) is off.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
With Drive Modes, the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any
NOTE:
time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track, or Full OFF.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
10. Speedometer
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will come
Indicates vehicle speed. on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light • Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
turned off previously.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
position. It should go out with the engine sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
12. Turn Signal Indicators If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
NOTE: If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced 4
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
signal on. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 14. Fuel Gauge
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
15. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION! (Continued)
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
ture. Any reading within the normal range for a fully remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that engine OFF immediately and call for service.
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera- WARNING!
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
CAUTION! vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads Pressure Cap paragraph.
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
(Continued)
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light 18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
ON/RUN position. A chime will sound if the OBD system monitors engine and automatic
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu- the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine 4
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re- from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- promptly.
hicle” for further information. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly not require towing.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
CAUTION!
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interac-
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator tive display which is located in the instrument cluster.
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result Driver Information Display (DID) Display
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
others.
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The The system allows the driver to select information by
DID Menu Items consists of the following: pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance 4
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
DID Controls
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons: NOTE:
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to • Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow but-
cycle through the Main Menu Items. tons will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area. • Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen
LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons: viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons OK Button:
allows you to cycle through the submenu items For Digital Speedometer:
of the Main menu item.
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the UP/DOWN arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
the 1st page of the submenu). driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time
• Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each sub-
you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off
menu layer and return to the main menu.
the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perfor- reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the 4
mance Timers): scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
button. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
Engine Oil Life Reset START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Oil Change Required
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message within 10 seconds.
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you 2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life the ”Oil Life” screen.
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
4. Push and hold the OK button until the “Oil Life”
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change screen displays.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “
will flash in the DID display for approximately 10
Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
reset of the Oil Life.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent submenu screen.
upon your personal driving style.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
procedure(s): reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Cruise Control DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include: tales. These telltales include:
• Cruise Ready • Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate This light warns the driver of a potential colli-
4
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
activated. driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
• Electronic Speed Control SET
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
This telltale will illuminate green when the hicle” for further information.
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elec- • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
information. shield washer fluid is low.
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped DID Red Telltales
This light will turn on when a ACC is not This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales.
operating and needs service. Refer to “Adap- These telltales include:
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding • Power Steering System Over Temperature — If Equipped
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information. If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the DID
• LaneSense Failure Telltale screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure. vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
• Service AWD Indicator
NOTE:
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning • Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
properly and that service is required. tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
service. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
• Door Ajar The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar. This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while 4
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
• Decklid Ajar
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid the charging system light remains on, it means that the
may be ajar. vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au-
thorized dealer.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light • Oil Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
light will come on when the ignition is first the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb possible.
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have • Air Bag Warning Light
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is Vehicle” for further information.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur If you continue operating the vehicle when the
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on, contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire. 4
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with
the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
DID Selectable Menu Items
CAUTION!
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of
digital speedometer.
Vehicle Info Oil Life
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Battery Voltage
the Vehicle Info menu is displayed in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the submenus AWD Status — If Equipped
items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to Air Intake Temp — If Equipped
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items: Engine Torque — If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitor Engine Power — If Equipped
Coolant Temp Air-Fuel Ratio— If Equipped
Trans Temp Boost — If Equipped
Oil Temp Intercooler Water Temp — If Equipped
Oil Pressure Engine Hours Idle Hours — If Equipped

Performance Features The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
WARNING!
– Best
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor- – Last
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off- – Current
road use only and should not be done on any public 4
– Reaction Timer
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the • 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as – Best
measured by the performance pages must never be – Last
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
– Current
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can – Reaction Timer
prevent accidents. • 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Under- – Best
standing Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/Sub- – Last
Menu selectable items and navigation. – Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer The following describes each feature and its operation:
– Best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
– Last
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
– Current the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
– Reaction Timer 10 seconds.
• Braking Distance • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
– Distance 0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
– From Speed conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Current G-Forces • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• Peak G-Forces
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph
• Lap Timer (0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for
• Lap History two seconds.
– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted
in green.
• Top Speed
0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) tions are met for the event to begin.
within 20 seconds. • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when • To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, 4
conditions are met for the event to begin. push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters).
button for two seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
1/8 Mile (200 Meters) (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the tions are met for the event to begin.
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile. mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run, • Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the
push and hold the OK button for two seconds. current and last run values.
Braking Distance Current G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was (lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of
pushed. the forces.
• This feature will only function when applying the Peak G-Force
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature. values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are • When a force greater than zero is measured, the
met for the event to begin. display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place. • Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
values.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
Lap Timer • The timer will stop when the driver navigates away
from this page.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time Lap History
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
• Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0. will color highlight the time that is the best time from the
Timer Page. 4
• When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current”
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
timer will stop and the time will be reset to 0:00.00.
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “cur-
• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
the Timer Page.
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible). • Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
on.
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
time populates, the Last time and also populates the • Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.
Top Speed Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
the following displays in the DID:
last reset:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
unless/until the driver resets the screen. tive Cruise Control Off.”
• Latching over ignition cycles. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Units will change with the global change in units. When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC LaneSense — If Equipped
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
• Distance Setting Change The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
• System Cancel
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
• Driver Override in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” 4
• System Off Fuel Economy
• ACC Proximity Warning Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-
• The DID will return to the last display selected after played and one without the Current Value displayed:
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- – Range To Empty (miles or km)
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The – Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber Stored Messages
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Trip Info
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until what the stored messages are.
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
Screen Setup
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following: Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
• Distance release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
• Average Fuel Economy Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
• Elapsed Time that information is displayed.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information. 1. Upper Left
Audio • Compass
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until • Outside Temp. (default)
the Audio Menu displays in the DID. • Time
• Range to Empty 3. Center
• Average L/100km (or MPG) • Menu Title (default)
• Current L/100km (or MPG) • Compass
• Trip A Distance • Outside Temp.
• Trip B Distance • Time
• None • Range to Empty 4
2. Upper Right • Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Compass (default) • Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Outside Temp • Trip A Dis
• Time • Trip B Distance
• Range to Empty • Audio Inform
• Average L/100km (or MPG) • None
• Current L/100km (or MPG) 4. Gear Display
• Trip A Distance • Single Di
• Trip B Distance • Full PRND (default)
• None
5. Defaults (defaults: Outside Temp UL, Compass UR, return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
Center Menu Title) corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
• Ok NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
• Cancel Your Instrument Panel” for further information on en-
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped abling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift
Indicator.
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle Uconnect® SETTINGS
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the DID display when the driver configured gear shift the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating. access and change the customer programmable features.
This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre-
sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is CAUTION!
advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate 2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, Uconnect® touchscreen.
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
5.0 Settings
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a Push the + MORE button on the faceplate and then press
setting (i.e., ON, OFF). the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
allows you to access programmable features that may be
Back buttons on the faceplate.
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort &
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings,
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on. Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- • Set Language
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
select the preferred setting. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touch- languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-
screen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,” 4
Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you or “Español.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
to toggle up or down through the available settings. touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Display • Touchscreen Beep
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
the following settings will be available: sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To
change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or
• Display Mode
“Off” button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re- menu.
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
Units • Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
• Power
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
measure are listed below: • Torque
• Speed
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
• Distance arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
Select from: “mi” or “km.” previous menu.
• Fuel Consumption Voice
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
“km/L.” following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Pressure
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
sponse Length settings. To change mode status, press and
release the “Brief” or “Long” button on the touchscreen. arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to select “AM” or “PM.” Press the back arrow/Done button
return to the previous menu. on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Show Command List • Show Time Status
When in this display, you may change the Show Com- When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
mand List settings. To change the mode status, press and digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time 4
release the “Always,” “With Help,” or “Never” button on Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.” Press the
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
Clock & Date
• Set Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available: When in this display, you may set the date manually.
• Set Time Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
When in this display, you may set the time and format date to adjust. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding
Safety/Assistance For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
Vehicle.”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped • Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport”
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount
means the system will warn you of a possible collision of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far” return to the previous menu.
button. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• ParkSense® • Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is selected from the DID or Uconnect® System — if
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear 4
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and ParkSense® Volume” button on the touchscreen, then
Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and select from “Low,” “Med,” or “High.” Press the back
release the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” but- arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
ton. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known
touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding configuration state through ignition cycles.
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
• Blind Spot Alert NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When • ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Moni- Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
tor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE.
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
status, press the “Off,” “Lights,” or “Lights & Chime” display along with a caution note to “check entire surround-
button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/ ings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this
Done button on the touchscreen. note will disappear. To enable or disable, press the
“ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on
the touchscreen, and select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the on the windshield. To enable or disable, press the “Rain
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay Sensing” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” or
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- 4
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of screen to return to the previous menu.
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls” system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the and operating information. To enable or disable, press the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, and select
button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
“OFF.” touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touch-
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
screen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons
the following settings will be available:
on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Headlight Off Delay Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of return to the previous menu.
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
screen to return to the previous menu. turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button
• Headlight Illumination On Approach and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the menu.
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped • Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con- when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
Beams” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On” selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights 4
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
”Automatic High Beam — If Equipped” in “Understand- “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa- touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
tion.
Doors & Locks
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on screen, the following settings will be available:
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, • Auto Unlock On Exit
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
previous menu. NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” • Remote Door Unlock
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
This feature will allow you to program your remote door
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
• Sound Horn With Lock mitter or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To
make your selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, button on the touchscreen and choose from “All” or
“Driver.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the
press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Press” or “2nd Press.” Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) transmitter
• Sound Horn With Remote Start will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
doors.
• Passive Entry
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch- This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
screen and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
previous menu. unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is
grabbed. To make your selection, press the “Passive Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
“Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
screen to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless available:
Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information. • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped 4
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights Seats” button on the touchscreen then select either “Off,”
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from “Remote Start” or “All Starts.” Press the back arrow/
“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow/Done button on the Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. menu.
Engine Off Options 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “Engine Off
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Power Delay” button and select from “0 seconds,” “45
• Headlight Off Delay seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” buttons on the
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Compass Settings — If Equipped
Delay status press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on
the touchscreen and select from “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time touchscreen the following settings will be available:
interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touch- • Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
• Engine Off Power Delay North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
When this feature is selected, the power window
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the • Perform Compass Calibration
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which elimi-
module is located, and it can cause interference with the nates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings. vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing 4
the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows
to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. Press
Compass Variance Map the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Equalizer button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
the previous menu.
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”
• Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
the previous menu.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch- • Loudness — If Equipped
screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back
• Surround Sound — If Equipped arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
Phone/Bluetooth® • Channel Skip
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
touchscreen the following settings will be available: channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
• Paired Phones exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
This feature shows which phones are paired to the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
4
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. touchscreen.
• Paired Audio Sources • Subscription Information
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available: Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To Clear Personal Data
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
the screen or visit the provider online. on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription able:
and is available for U.S. residents only. • Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To re-
touchscreen the following settings will be available: move all personal information, press the “Clear Personal
Data” button and select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is
• Restore Settings
selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. “Cancel” to exit. Press the back arrow/Done button on
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”
If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select
“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Press back arrow/
Done button to return to the previous menu.
System Information NOTE:
After pressing the “System Information” button on the • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
• System Information may vary.
When System Information is selected, a System Informa- When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
4
tion screen will appear displaying the system software screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
version. mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
Customer Programmable Features — check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
Press the “Apps,” or the “Controls,” button on the touch- return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Press-
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the ing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice,
available settings.
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
Display on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available: NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
When in this display you may select one of the auto ⬙parade⬙ positions.
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen. • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. When in this display, you may select the brightness with the
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–”
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touch-
even though the headlights are on. screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–” ⬙parade⬙ positions.
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point
• Set Theme — If Equipped • Touchscreen Beep
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
display screen. The theme will change the background sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
color, highlight color, and button color of the display touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
screen. button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
• Set Language 4
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
When in this display, you may select one of multiple return to the previous menu.
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan- stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
appears next to the language, showing that setting has until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
screen to return to the previous menu. appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped • Distance
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions Select from: “mi” or “km.”
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a • Fuel Consumption
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark “km/L.”
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Pressure
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu. Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
Units • Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
may select each unit of measure independently displayed • Power
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
measure are listed below: • Torque
• Speed Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
previous menu. lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the Clock
following settings will be available: After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the 4
• Voice Response Length following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, This feature will allow you to automatically have the
press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
• Show Command List the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may change the Show Com-

mand List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
• Set Time Hours • Time Format
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync This feature will allow you to select the time format
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
return to the previous menu. to the previous menu.
• Set Time Minutes • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
return to the previous menu. the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen.
Safety & Driving Assistance For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
Vehicle”.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able: • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional 4
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
means the system will warn you of a possible collision your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far” With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touch- Your Vehicle.”
screen.
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
Vehicle”.
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to • Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
zone start point. the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer-
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve- ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
hicle”. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
The amount of directional torque the steering system can previous menu.
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
• ParkSense® your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled 4
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the • Rear ParkSense® Volume
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only”
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
system function and operating information. your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button
• Front ParkSense® Volume on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
• Blind Spot Alert the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be in the BSM not operating to specification.
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “RE-
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
VERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or the
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along 4
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup Camera
disappear. To make your selection, press the “ParkView
Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView®
Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on the touch-
Delay ON or OFF.
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
“Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen,
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the ve-
hicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
back button on the faceplate.
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press • Headlight Illumination On Approach
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
following settings will be available.
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back 4
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights • Flash Lights With Lock
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
further information. next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen • Flash Lights With Lock
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
on the faceplate.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Doors & Locks Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available: or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
• Auto Unlock On Exit button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To to return to the previous menu.
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” • Sound Horn With Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
to return to the previous menu. press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
previous menu. RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 4
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
menu.
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first RKE transmitter).
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
• Passive Entry enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal Set-
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
tings Linked to Key Fob” button on the touchscreen, until
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
back button on the faceplate.
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
Equipped
for further information.
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored
to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available: touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering • Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
4
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With previous menu.
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start” • Engine Off Power Delay
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back When this feature is selected, the power window
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
menu. DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the • Balance/Fade
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,”
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
previous menu.
• Headlight Off Delay
• Equalizer
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
Audio
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the directly on the desired setting.
following settings will be available.
• Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
to the previous menu.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. • Loudness — If Equipped
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
to the previous menu. make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the 4
• Surround Sound — If Equipped touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
menu.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the Phone/Bluetooth®
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
previous menu. touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped • Paired Phones
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which phones are paired to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources • Subscription Information
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available: Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
• Channel Skip
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip and is available for U.S. residents only.
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Restore Settings • Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
touchscreen the following settings will be available: including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
• Restore Settings personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
4
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. Press
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” previous menu.
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings System Information
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen After pressing the “System Information” button on the
to exit. touchscreen the following information will be available:
Clear Personal Data • System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- tion screen will appear displaying the system software
able: version.
Performance Pages — If Equipped
Performance Pages is an application that provides a used in a controlled environment and within the
display for performance indicators, as received from the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity measured by the Performance Pages must never be
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
button on the touchscreen then press the “Performance others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
Pages” button on the touchscreen. Press the desired prevent accidents.
button on the touchscreen to access that specific Perfor-
mance Page. The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
WARNING!
• Timers
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
• Gauges 1
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public • Gauges 2
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
• G-Force
(Continued) • Engine
The following describes each feature and its operation: When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
Home
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images. 4
• A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
Performance Pages — Home

Timers When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages — Timers
• Save • With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save to the jump drive.
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page. 4
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer

“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
Performance Pages — Save NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h)
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) • Brake Distance
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h). stop.
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h). before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake Speed
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
(200 meters). brake pedal is depressed.
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile 30 MPH (48 km/h).
(400 meters).
Gauges 1 When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure. 4
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 1

Gauges 2 When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Automatic

Transmission)
G-Force When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
4
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and
Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
Charger Performance Pages — G-Force achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
they are cleared by the driver.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
• Vehicle Speed Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Performance Pages — Engine

When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts controlled through the Uconnect® radio and may be ac-
cessed by performing any of the following:
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instru-
• Instantaneous Torque
ment panel switch bank.
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps”
• Oil Pressure menu. 4
Shows the actual engine oil pressure. • Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Per-
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only) formance Pages menu.
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
vehicle. functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Performance Control — If Equipped
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control access information about the functionality of these fea-
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of tures through the Uconnect® system, press the “Info”
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driv- button on the touchscreen.
ing behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can Launch Control
prevent accidents. This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The Drive Mode Set-Up
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
4
NOTE:
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
of the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine Drive Mode Set-Up
and transmission are at operating temperature. Pressing the “Drive Mode Set-Up” button on the touch-
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved screen within the Performance Control screen indicates the
real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the “Sport
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” buttons on the
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
touchscreen, the driver can configure their individual drive Default Mode
modes and see how those configurations affect the perfor-
mance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission Auto
Engine N/A
Engine/Trans X
Steering X
Paddle Shifters X
Traction Control X Default Mode
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode
operation. is for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode,
the Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using
the Launch Control feature.
their Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steer- Sport Mode
ing assist may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Com-
fort by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touch-
screen. The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled
while in this mode.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusi-
ast driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
Default Mode Set-Up their Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches
are enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal.
Any of these four settings may be changed to the driver’s Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen. accompanying descriptions. The information contained
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch in the list below can also be accessed from within the
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the
settings. The customized settings will only be active “Info” button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
when the Sport button is active. menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descrip-
tions for each function of that system.
Sport Mode Set-Up

Engine/Trans • Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
• Normal
4
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for
normal driving.
Engine/Trans
Paddle Shifters • OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Traction
Paddle Shifters
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters. Traction Control
• SPORT Steering
Press the “SPORT” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• NORMAL
Press the “NORM” button on the touchscreen to provide 4
full traction control and full stability control.
Steering
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest
amount of steering effort.
• Normal The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
• Comfort
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of steering feel and steering effort.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod® or an external USB device to
be plugged into the USB port. AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® 2 — USB Port
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions 3 — SD Card Slot
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
USB “Charge Only” ports. EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
Rear USB Charging Ports

The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The button located in the center of the left-hand control
push-button in the center and controls the volume and will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker grammed in the radio preset button.
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
AUX, etc.) your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
The following describes the left-hand control operation in turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
each mode. not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play. 4
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Equipped Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen. 1. MAX A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons 3. Recirculation Button
On The Touchscreen Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
the heating elements:
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode 4
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
and side window defrosting and defogging.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
5. Rear Defrost Button soaking with warm water.
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window cleaners on the interior surface of the
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window window.
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
6. Blower Control 7. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
forced through the climate system. There are seven comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or • Panel Mode
buttons on the touchscreen as follows: Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
control knob counterclockwise. direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
Buttons On The Touchscreen from these outlets.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting • Bi-Level Mode
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
area between the icons. directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- 8. Climate Control OFF Button
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
warmer air from the floor outlets.
ON/OFF.
• Floor Mode
9. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost Provides the driver with independent temperature con- 4
and side window demister outlets. trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
• Mix Mode perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button into the red area for warmer
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
temperature settings.
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions. NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
time.
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button 12. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
slide the temperature bar button into the red area for the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
warmer temperature settings. perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same 13. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
time. Provides the passenger with independent temperature
11. Temperature Control control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
cooler temperature settings.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera- adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
tures. time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler NOTE:
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
cooler temperature settings. 4
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically of the windows.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
time.
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
Climate Control Functions needed.
A/C (Air Conditioning) • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
MAX A/C pressing the Recirculation control button. The recircula-
tion indicator will illuminate when this button is selected.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
Push the button a second time to turn off the Recircula-
mance.
tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
when MAX A/C is ON.
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
Recirculation Control
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or and then turn off.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Buttons On The Touchscreen
Touchscreen — If Equipped Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Buttons On The Faceplate Uconnect® system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
4
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Con-
Press and release to change the current setting, the trol (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front
indicator illuminates when ON. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window cleaners on the interior surface of the
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window window.
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
turns off after 10 minutes. 4
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
CAUTION! (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Provides the passenger with independent temperature
the heating elements: control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth for warmer temperature settings.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after automatically exit Sync.
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button 10. Blower Control
(Uconnect® 8.4 Radio Only)
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
Provides the passenger with independent temperature forced through the climate system. There are seven
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow speeds can be selected using either the blower control
for cooler temperature settings. knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync. Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
9. SYNC The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise.
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Button On The Touchscreen direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
from these outlets.
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar • Bi-Level Mode
area between the icons. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is 4
11. Modes
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air ter outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
as follows:
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Panel Mode
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
amount of air is directed through the defrost
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
and side window demister outlets.
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
• Mix Mode NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
window demist outlets. This mode works best time.
in cold or snowy conditions. 14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
12. Climate Control OFF Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
ON/OFF. trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only) warmer temperature settings.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera- adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the time.
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
temperature settings.
Climate Control Functions • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
A/C (Air Conditioning)
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into MAX A/C 4
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually mance.
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
NOTE: ON.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
needed. will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, 1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The ture Control (ATC) Panel.
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation automatically maintain that comfort level.
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode system to function automatically.
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
NOTE: Manual Operation Override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly trol.
as possible. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at 4
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
this section of the manual. circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips Winter Operation
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
suggested control settings for various weather condi- is not recommended because it may cause window
tions. fogging.
Summer Operation Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, 4
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win- slush, and snow.
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
A/C Air Filter
but rainy or humid weather.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
NOTE: dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
periods, as fogging may occur. “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system. 4
Uconnect® 5.0
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
Uconnect® 8.4AN facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category. 4
Uconnect® Voice Command

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen. Uconnect® 5.0
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ 4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio

Media TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the 4
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone

Voice Text Reply PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have com- Are you there ber> minutes
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.) Call me. late.
yet?
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push I’ll call you I need See you in
the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply.” later. directions. <number> of
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the I’m lost. now. Thanks.
system prompts.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later. UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
Start without ports reading incoming text messages only.
No. I’ll be Late.
me.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the 4
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) Remote Door Lock/Unlock
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take Stolen Vehicle Assistance
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next Remote Vehicle Start**
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get Remote Horn and Lights
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found Yelp® Search 4
on the next page.
Voice Texting
NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped
Roadside Assistance Call
vehicles purchased within the continental United States
and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Wi-Fi Hotspot***
available; see coverage map for details. **If vehicle is equipped.
9-1-1 Call ***Extra charges apply.
Security Alarm Notification
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access. Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and

complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with moparownerconnect.com.
factory-installed Remote Start.) 4
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) TIP:
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After • Not compatible with iPhone®.
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
sage to John Smith.”
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
illuminated to use the feature.
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
to process your message. Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or your voice to search for the most popular places or things
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® around you.
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy 1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your 3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
voice to send a personalized text message.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button , then say: “YELP
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Uconnect® to find.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. system. (Not available for 8.4A system.) 4
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp®
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com- Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
mand. trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
SiriusXM Travel Link™ Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

Additional Information Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
you call.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .395
5
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .395
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .406
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .393 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .419
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 ▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .415 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .438
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .453
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 ▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .441 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 ▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 5
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .461
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .451 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .452 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .471
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .469
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .485
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do not
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
belts. Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
WARNING! controls, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
Automatic Transmission
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in before shifting into any driving gear.
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- This feature allows the driver to oper-
ing precautions are not observed: ate the ignition switch with the push
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL of a button, as long as the Remote
into any forward gear when the engine is above Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
idle speed. is in the passenger compartment.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to 5
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Normal Starting
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
is firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the engine starting, push the button again. the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
pedal.
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE message and the engine will remain running. Never
START/STOP Button leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two OFF position.
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
NEUTRAL Position) an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
WARNING! 5
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
change the ignition to the ACC position. the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
(Continued)
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
has started, ignite and damage the converter and 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster 2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster hold it.
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type 3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer once.
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
WARNING!
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up. Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a 5
grounded, three-wire extension cord. WARNING!
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
is located near the air box. someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is or the transmission gear selector.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, in a location accessible to children), and do not
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the A child could operate power windows, other con-
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve- trols, or move the vehicle.
hicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the CAUTION!
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with ing precautions are not observed:
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
speed. unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
is firmly pressing the brake pedal. pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is 5
shifting out of PARK. stopped or moving at low speeds.
Key Ignition Park Interlock Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver (DID).
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
the OFF position. also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE- The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
tem” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
driving. condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
Automatic Transmission Shifter (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, PARK (P)
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for- This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
ward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the vehicle in this range.
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
5
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
Gear Ranges brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
ment and possible injury or damage. running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav- sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
ing the vehicle. against unwanted movement.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

fatally injured. Children should be warned not to • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
lever. can damage the drivetrain.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not The following indicators should be used to ensure that
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
A child could operate power windows, other con- tion: 5
trols, or move the vehicle. • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
CAUTION! forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you • Look at the transmission gear position display and
must start the engine and also press the brake verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
result. will not move out of PARK.
(Continued)
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
stop. reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
NEUTRAL (N) Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking for further information.
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
DRIVE (D)
leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
WARNING! driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
practices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
tions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds), gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing Transmission function is monitored electronically for
excessive shifting and heat buildup. abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
5
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
below), transmission operation may be modified depend- operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
MANUAL (M) restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
indicate what actions may be necessary.
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the shift lever
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 5. Restart the engine.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
following steps.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message operation.
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
1. Stop the vehicle. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
AUTOSTICK in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+)
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
can also provide you with more control during passing, paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the shift lever is in
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tap- 5
trailer towing, and many other situations. ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to
Operation
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission will
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains
shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelera-
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be tor pedal activity.
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high-
lighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
shift lever, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an pressed to the floor.
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
shift is chosen, except as described below.
display the current gear.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
the transmission will automatically shift up when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
fully depressed, the transmission will downshift when
vehicle is accelerated.
possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear,
except 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
will cause the transmission to revert to automatic Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
operation. gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE, over-speed, that shift will not occur.
or as described below. The transmission will not
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
WARNING!
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
holding the shift lever in the (-) position, will down- slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
current speed. personal injury.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE 5
AutoStick is engaged. CONTROL
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
fault or overheat condition is detected. mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
equipped, and the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until provide improved throttle response and modified shift-
“D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You ing for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. activated and deactivated by pressing the Sport button
on the instrument panel switch bank.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes, Refer to “Per- unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
formance Control — If Equipped” within “Uconnect conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
chapter for further information. AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
wheels as necessary. to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understand-
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mes- DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
Acceleration
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
Panel” for further information. erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
CAUTION! the rear (driving) wheels.
5
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. WARNING!
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
the transfer case. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed: Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
• Keep tires properly inflated. is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
sudden stop.
(Continued)

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
warning may result in injuries that are serious or ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
Shallow Standing Water injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through sengers, and others around you.
5
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so. CAUTION!
WARNING! • Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Determine the condition of the road or the path
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping the way before driving through the standing water.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving The electric power steering system will give you good
through standing water. This will minimize wave vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
effects. in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
• Driving through standing water may cause damage light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always the electric steering system experiences a fault that
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., ability to steer the vehicle manually.
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
driving through standing water. Do not continue to through the Uconnect® System. Refer to ”Customer
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such Equipped” within “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be Under these conditions there will be a substantial
obtained as soon as possible. increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SER- • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for 5
VICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER service.
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the Driver Infor- FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
mation Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to — IF EQUIPPED
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
Instrument Panel” for further information. and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
before attempting to move the vehicle. ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. 5
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking number of reasons. A child or others could be
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift or the shift lever/gear selector.
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
(Continued)
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
in a location accessible to children), and do not parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN authorized dealer immediately.
controls, or move the vehicle. BRAKE SYSTEM
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision. Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or systems loses normal capability, the remaining
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in system will still function. There will be some
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
and cause damage or injury. by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
example, repeated brake applications with the engine Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System
with the power system operating. (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All four
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi- and control in various driving conditions.
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist 5
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica- The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
tions) this is considered normal conditions. vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control • Brake pedal pulsations.
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you of the stop.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or ment that may be susceptible to interference
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- caused by improperly installed or high output
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose radio transmitting equipment. This interference
debris, or panic stops. can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
You also may experience the following when the brake bility. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-Lock: performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a (Continued)
short time after the stop).
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish accurate signals for the computer.
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just Traction Control System (TCS)
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
slow down or stop. driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase 5
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
the traction afforded. (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous and ESC are in the “Sport Mode (Partial Off)” or ⬙Track
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or Mode (Full Off)⬙ mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Con-
the safety of others. trol (ESC)” in this section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma- The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ- from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
can help reduce braking distances. sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure others.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
WARNING!
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle accidents, including those resulting from excessive
maintain the desired path. speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or 5
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than of others.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Operating Modes The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
The ESC system has two or three available operating center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
modes: mode, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the
⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESC
ESC On on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and
the ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving WARNING!
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
Partial Off scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the tem is reduced.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows. ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
NOTE: Full Off — If Equipped
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen- stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
tarily pushing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done chime will sound, the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Lamp⬙ will 5
while the vehicle is in motion. illuminate, and the “ESC off” message may appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In-
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
formation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
strument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
The system will release brake pressure in proportion to
WARNING!
the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque move in the intended direction of travel.
reduction and stability features are disabled. There- HSA Activation Criteria
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining activate:
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway • Vehicle must be stopped.
or off-road use only.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
Hill Start Assist (HSA) greater hill.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
during this short period of time, the system will release the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.

There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This hill and this could cause a collision with another
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak- rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
ing the vehicle. manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is 5
Towing With HSA responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
when pulling a trailer.
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
WARNING! hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
HSA Off Rain Brake Support
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further infor- amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
mation. on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
Ready Alert Braking
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
ESC OFF Indicator Light
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes. when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator NOTE:
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
diagnosed and corrected. that caused the ESC activation. 5
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also off or full off.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Synchronizing ESC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load

Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum Pressure
2 — Size Designation 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
3 — Service Description Temperature Grades
NOTE: tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have 5
T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol 5
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) 5
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
Tire And Loading Information Placard inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 5
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the weight referenced here.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
capacity calculated in step 4. and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(392 kg).
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
5
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety and Vehicle Stability lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Fuel Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. Tread Wear
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. 5
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
door. been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
At least once a month: The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge- wall.
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
WARNING!
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 75 mph (120 km/h). 5
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very WARNING!
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
• The tire has not been driven on when flat. Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or If you need snow tires, select tires
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use equivalent in size and type to the origi-
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
WARNING! handling of your vehicle.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury was originally equipped with your vehicle and should 5
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
the possibility of loss of vehicle control. (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
Snow Tires recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tire inflation pressures.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mode.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
checked before using these tire types. mation.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Spare Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
CAUTION!
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel — If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended 5
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
tire rotation pattern.
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. WARNING!
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on only. With these spares, do not drive more than
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M. (Continued)
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
first opportunity.
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Tire Spinning
WARNING!
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In- spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the ping.
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located Emergencies” for further information.
5
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original WARNING!
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
of vehicle control. age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire • Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or Replacement Tires
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
tenance schedule is highly recommended. wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
WARNING! lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to “Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading 5
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
You could lose control and have a collision resulting the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
in serious injury or death. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact this manual for more information relating to the Load
with oil, grease, and gasoline. Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
those of the original wheels. sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions approved for your vehicle.
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect capacity, other than what was originally equipped
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
WARNING! You could lose control and have a collision.
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
(Continued)
• Due to limited clearance, use reduced size snow chains
CAUTION!
or traction devices with a maximum projection of
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size 6 mm beyond the tire profile on either P235/55R18 99V
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- or P225/60R18 99H tires.
ings.
WARNING!
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable 5
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as CAUTION!
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
• Install on Rear Tires Only. used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
mended cold placard pressure. and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de- off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- 5
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the “TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto-
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no this information.
adjustment for this increased pressure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F warning have been established for the tire size
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire eration or sensor damage may result when using
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres- your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sure value. sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
CAUTION! always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
NOTE: • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
or condition.
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
while adjusting your tire pressure.
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire. 5
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Premium System
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
stopping ability. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the

Tire Pressure Monitor Display instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly tires. In addition, the DID will display a “LOW TIRE”
and to maintain the proper pressure. message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color. An ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also
be displayed in the DID display.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. Once the longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will following:
return the pressure values shown to their original color, and
the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving 5
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
in order for the TPMS to receive this information. the TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the wheel housings.
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
not being received.
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system display the low pressure values in a different color and
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
message is then followed with a graphic display with
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
Vehicles With Compact Spare
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the compact spare tire. minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in FUEL REQUIREMENTS
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to This engine is designed to meet all emis-
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the sions regulations and provide excellent
TPMS to receive this information. fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-
General Information 5
line having an octane rating of 87 as speci-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
following two conditions: “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
(2) This device must accept any interference received, in- 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
by the party responsible for compliance could void the than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
user’s authority to operate the equipment. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
ering service for the vehicle. starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
5.7L Engine — If Equipped symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions Reformulated Gasoline
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
economy and performance when using high- burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
quality unleaded gasoline having an octane Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recom- prove air quality.
mended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
system components.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
genates such as ethanol. line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
CAUTION! ited Warranty.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
5
blends may result in starting and drivability prob- • Operate in a lean mode.
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi- • Poor engine performance.
nate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
10% ethanol. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Metha-
nol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be
covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline Materials Added To Fuel
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage conditions and they would result in additional cost.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug fuel.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
Fuel System Cautions
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
CAUTION!
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal performance:
and California reformulated gasoline. • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING!
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
malfunctioning and may require immediate service. monoxide poisoning:
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. 5
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Most of these products contain high concentrations
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
mance problems resulting from the use of such more than a short period, adjust the ventilation sys-
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the tem to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
manufacturer and may void or not be covered • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
windows fully open.
you.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
EQUIPPED E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
E-85 General Information unleaded gasoline.
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
WARNING!
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un- Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
the other sections of this manual for information on near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
gasoline-only powered vehicles. cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
CAUTION! Fuel Requirements
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85. unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline. compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
When switching fuel types: engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling. additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km). Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
5
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
NOTE:
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
rough idle following start up may be experienced even requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
if the above recommendations are followed, especially MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C). during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional pro-
tection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the Maintenance
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
CAUTION!
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per may affect drivability.
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door

NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
2. Open the fuel filler door. door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain. Fuel Funnel
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. CAUTION!
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for off” the fuel tank after filling.
emergency refueling with a gas can.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
WARNING!
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the filler door emergency release.
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
1. Open the trunk.
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is 2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- trim panel).
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator 5
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable. VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Release Cable
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
WARNING!
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
• Type of Vehicle important that you do not exceed the maximum front
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 5
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
GVWR. service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or it is not over the GVWR.
rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle NOTE:
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
evenly over the front and rear axles.
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and GAWRs.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
tire pressure.
GVWR.
Loading TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty In this section you will find safety tips and information
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before review this information to tow your load as efficiently
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you and safely as possible.
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. follow the requirements and recommendations in this
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue and trailer when weighed in combination.
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) 5
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- information.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Trailer Sway Control
WARNING!
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
control of the vehicle and have a collision. swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
vehicle. they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the system may reduce handling, stability, braking
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used performance, and could result in a collision.
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec- 5
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue Weight (See

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Trailer Weight) Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Trailer And Tongue Weight
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
information.
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
train components the following guidelines are recom- overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
mended: cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
WARNING! suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. • Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 5
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible: the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering enough slack for turning corners.
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
have a collision. transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
(Continued) • GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
ratings are not exceeded: or other parts could be damaged.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
Information” placard. trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
2. GTW
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
3. GAWR the heavier loads.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
Towing Requirements — Tires
lized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.) spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper- Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
tire inflation procedures. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- This could cause inadequate braking and possible
sures before trailer usage. personal injury.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with 5
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for informa-
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
inspection procedure. brake controller is not required.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor- • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for information 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace- 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
collision. pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- ness and connector.
tance. When towing you should allow for additional NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of wiring harness.
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
CAUTION! Refer to the following illustrations.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
heavy traffic.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Automatic Transmission you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid maximize fuel efficiency.
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to manually select a • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
lower gear. highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor- the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- “3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow. Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
Cooling System acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
5
heating, take the following actions: OFF the ground.
City Driving
CAUTION!
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
Highway Driving case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
Reduce speed. covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .501
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .502
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 6
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED ▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .523
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .522
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition: 6
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops properly calibrated torque wrench.
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for Torque Specifications
service.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
Bolt Size Bolt Socket
WARNING! Size
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time tightening.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
WARNING!
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
against the wheel. been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when Avoid ice or slippery areas.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get and spare tire.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is access the jack.
on a jack. 1. Open the trunk.
(Continued) 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener

3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
WARNING!
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
assembly. vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Jacking And Changing A Tire
3. Set the parking brake.
WARNING!
4. Place the shift lever/gear selector into PARK.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
5. Turn OFF the ignition. help prevent personal injury or damage to your
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel vehicle:
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi- • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
tion. For example, if changing the right edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
front tire, block the left rear wheel. vehicle. 6
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
when the vehicle is being jacked. be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
6
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Front Jacking Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.
6
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem Mounting Spare Tire
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use torque.
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its tightening down the fastener.
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug WARNING!
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
WARNING! hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has repaired or replaced immediately.
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
seated against the wheel.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
lug nuts. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
WARNING! screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, 6
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
result in personal injury. to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
Tire Service Kit Location 2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom
side of the Tire Service Kit)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Selecting Air Mode Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this Using The Deflation Button
position for air pump operation only. Use the Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 6
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
when selecting this mode. assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
your original equipment vehicle dealer. 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the heat source.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
the Tire Service Kit. collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
under the following circumstances: the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. you, your passengers, and others around you. 6
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
– If the tire has any damage from driving with Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
extremely low tire pressure. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
tire. skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
– If the wheel has any damage. ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
the wheel. possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy- necessary to place the valve stem in this position
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of before proceeding.
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
immediately. in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Sealant Mode position.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
nails) from the tire. stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant 6
Deflated Tire: Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the (D) Drive Vehicle:
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
hicle.” Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after 6
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte- to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
Tire Service Kit components which may cause around you.
permanent damage to the kit.
(E) After Driving: If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position. opening.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
stem. reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3).
the vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
panel after the tire has been repaired. housing.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos- that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace- the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
ment”. housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
using the Tire Service Kit. of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its 6
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
CAUTION! on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your 6
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
Remote Battery Post Locations sparks away from the battery.
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
CAUTION!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
Jump-Starting Procedure charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
WARNING! cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
result in personal injury or property damage due to negative (-) post of the booster battery.
battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
the discharged battery.
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
parts. cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged you should have the battery and charging system in-
battery. spected at your authorized dealer.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
CAUTION!
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets wheels or racing the engine.
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
plugged in long enough without engine operation, Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
starting.
CAUTION!
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the shift least one minute after every five rocking-motion
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
WARNING!
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
CAUTION! longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 6
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED 2. Remove the console storage bin.
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
Console Storage Bin
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead 3. Remove plastic cover under the bin by using the slot
battery), a Manual Park Release is available. provided to access the Manual Park Release lever.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: 4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. base.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the 6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
it to the right. rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
To Reset The Manual Park Release: 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
snaps into place to secure the lever.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condi- Wheels OFF RWD MODELS AWD MODELS

tion The Ground
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable: NOT ALLOWED
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Towing Condi- Wheels OFF RWD MODELS AWD MODELS

tion The Ground
Wheel Lift or Front NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow used, same limitations as above)
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if
used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN position
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in Park) 6
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
for towing.
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
CAUTION!
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing. ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not
Vehicle damage may occur. in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
attach to front or rear suspension components. be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the
towing. ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this unavailable.
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur. CAUTION!
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case dam-
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
age.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models • Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- age from improper towing is not covered under the
sion is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with allNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions: Without The Key Fob
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only 6
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .527 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .528 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .529 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 7
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 ▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .557
Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .583
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .567
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .572
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps . . .581
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emissions control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- PROGRAMS
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
soon as possible. an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction start this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
system is ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following: • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your DEALER SERVICE
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready. your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your penalties being assessed against you.
7
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
WARNING!
REPLACEMENT PARTS
You can be badly injured working on or around a
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle. vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
CAUTION! Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- fluid for the flushing procedure.
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
Engine Oil Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the 7
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
“SAFE” range on these engines.
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- This symbol means that the oil has
tion. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
manufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
CAUTION!
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use 7
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Oper-
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available. ating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
your area.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed. Engine Oil Filter
Materials Added To Engine Oil The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- at every engine oil change.
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to Engine Oil Filter Selection
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
tives.
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, filter and are recommended.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
WARNING! cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required.
near the engine compartment before starting the 7
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
serious personal injury. engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
Battery Location after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
WARNING! should not be disconnected and should only be
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
battery that the positive cable is attached to the at the start of each warm season. This service should
positive post and the negative cable is attached to include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the time.
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be- • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- 7
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant service be performed by authorized dealer or other
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
should be done by an experienced technician. PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
CAUTION! — If Equipped
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi- fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
Equipped facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
7
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
Filter Access Cover A/C Air Filter

3. Remove the used filter. 5. Close the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
7
components to ensure proper function. When performing the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha- petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
WARNING!
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the Commercially available windshield washer solvents
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and must be exercised when filling or working around
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the the washer solution.
residual water.
Exhaust System
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
system.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID). or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
CAUTION!
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
WARNING! effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further 7
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
information.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
vehicle.
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is image:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage. motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Cooling System Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera- fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni- authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
tion switch is in the ON position. accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If face of the condenser.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- 7
do not open the hood until the radiator has had ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
pressure cap when the radiator is hot. leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- Selection Of Coolant
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill CAUTION!
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
needed to be added to the system please contact your damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
local authorized dealer. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains ant is different and should not be mixed with
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
MS.90032). ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper system in an emergency, the cooling system will
maintenance intervals. need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au- the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
thorized dealer as soon as possible. MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional Please review these recommendations for using Organic
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
may plug the radiator. MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an- Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma- 7
tifreeze) is not recommended. terial Standard MS.90032.
Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
(−37° C) are anticipated.
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
engine cooling system. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- Cooling System Pressure Cap
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
the vehicle is operated. coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
NOTE: (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
WARNING!
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is with your local authorities to determine the disposal
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
system is hot or under pressure. emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one spills immediately.
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result. Coolant Level 7
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 ing.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
Points To Remember required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- protection of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow Brake System
hoses are not kinked or obstructed. In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is system components should be inspected periodically.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
condenser clean. maintenance intervals.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install WARNING!
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
sions. high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and 7
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
ure.
WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services. • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. can severely damage your brake system and/or
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may impair its performance. The proper type of brake
cause leaking in the system. fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require- reservoir.
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
leak and a checkup may be needed.
(Continued)
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake moisture.
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may Automatic Transmission
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- Selection Of Lubricant
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain 7
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. be used.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Fluid Level Check
Special Additives
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
any special additives in the transmission. fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
adversely affect seals. sion damage.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
Fluid And Filter Changes the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
life of the vehicle.
7
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
disassembled for any reason.
hole.
Fluid Changes Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
tion.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
Fluid Level Check nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
resistance built into your vehicle. hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
What Causes Corrosion? car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are: and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
• Stone and gravel impact. Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
7
• Insects, tree sap and tar. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
CAUTION!
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
scratch metal and painted surfaces. the owner.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
a month. • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and match the color of your vehicle.
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same brushes. These products and automatic car washes
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo- Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire 7
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
and tarnishing. Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION!
CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black

Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may nently damage this finish and such damage is not
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
equivalent is recommended. required to maintain this finish.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for

an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Interior Care
Equipped Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. 7
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, age than glass headlights.
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
CAUTION! To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Damage caused by these type of products may not be remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror. If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a 7
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are cloth.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and WARNING!
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
bing, etc.). material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
is off and that all the other services are switched off
with the cupholder in the center console.
and/or disengaged.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
7
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

allow water to get into the power distribution use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
center and possibly result in an electrical system result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
failure. a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped
3 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
– If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Electronic Stability Control
6 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Stability Control

8 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped 7
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped
19 50 Amp Red – Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washers – If Equipped / Police Feed

22 40 Amp Green / 20 – Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police
Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1 – If Equipped
24 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police)
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If Equipped
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module

39 – 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) / Adaptive
Cruise (LA) – If Equipped
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
7
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
Opening The Access Cover cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

allow water to get into the power distribution use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
center and possibly result in an electrical system result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
failure. a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)

2 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #1 7
3 — — Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink — Sunroof / Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink — Interior Lighting

9 40 Amp Green — Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Control Module
12 — 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
15 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue — Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 — — Fuse – Spare
18 30 Amp Pink — Mod Network Interface – Police
19 — — Fuse — Spare
21 30 Amp Pink (6.2L — Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
Supercharged) Fuel Pump (LD STD)
25 Amp Clear (LD
STD)

22 — 20 Amp Yellow – Right Spot Lamp – Police
Police Integrated Center Stack – LA
10 Amp Red – LA
23 — 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 — 15 Amp Blue Integrated Center Stack – LD/LX
25 — 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 — 15 Amp Blue – Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX)
LD/LX Fuel Pump (LA)
25 Amp Clear – LA Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged)
7
30 Amp Green –
LA 6.2L Super-
charged
27 — 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 — 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats
32 — 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster

33 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/Steering Column
Lock-LX If Equipped
34 — 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock/Spare – Police
35 — 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 — 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
37 — 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 — 15 Amp Blue – Console Power Outlet/Console Media Hub (LD/LX)
LD/LX Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub
20 Amp Yellow – (LA)
LA
42 30 Amp Pink — Rear Defrost
43 — 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel Module
44 — 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera

45 — 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LDLX)/
Humidity Sensor
47 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day
Time Running Lamps- If Equipped
48 — 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – SRT
51 — 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped 7
52 — 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
53 — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
54 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LA)

58 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module (LD/LX)
59 — 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 — 5 Amp Tan Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)
61 — 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter (LA) – If Equipped
64 — 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (LD/LX)
65 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
67 — 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor/Sunroof
68 — 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear
Sunshade (LD/LX)
VEHICLE STORAGE in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
7
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped 194
Bulb Number
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen Bi HIR2
Function Projector)
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Dis- D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
charge (Premium HID Bi Function Projector)
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Bulb Number
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 1. Open the hood.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be 7
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
accelerate the clearing process.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp hous-
ing by turning it counterclockwise, turn the bulb
counterclockwise and remove.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
CAUTION!
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil Headlamps (HID)
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
HID Headlamps
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol. The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
install the replacement bulb. this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
an authorized dealer for service.
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
5. Reinstall the dust cap. WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, Backup Lamps
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not service-
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after able separately. The Applique must be replaced as an
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The Side Markers use LED sources that are not service-
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
License Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not 7
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be re-
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 69.9 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/ 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We rec- 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
ommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
U.S. Metric
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recom- 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
mend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 7
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol- be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob- may plug the radiator.
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with tifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and
SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
Front Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lu- 7
bricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® OD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lu-
bricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
8
590 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance. message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informa-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Panel” for further information.
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next concern for fleet customers.
500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 591
Severe Duty All Models Required Maintenance Intervals.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This page for the required maintenance intervals.
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Change Indicator System:
• Check engine oil level • Change oil and filter
• Check windshield washer fluid level • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
required
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses 8
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake and park brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
fill as needed.
• Inspect exhaust system
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Maintenance Chart
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Kilometers: 112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
X X X X
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
X X X X X X X
wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes X X 8
first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the fol-
X X
lowing: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models

equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the X X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .599 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .600 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 9
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .600
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .604
598 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 599
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423-6343
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you 9
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contract documents, and contact the person listed in contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
those documents. nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
We appreciate that you have made a major investment State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer or other reproductive harm.
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with WARRANTY INFORMATION
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
concerns. warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
operating at its best.
You can also obtain other information about motor
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could causeIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ 9
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy roadsafety/
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on 9
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
WARNING!
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
peak traction characteristics. wheel, than the minimum required by law.
Temperature Grades WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The temperature grade for this tire is established for
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the heat buildup and possible tire failure.
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
INDEX 607
INDEX
10
608 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412, 414 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .172 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Air bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70, 97, 255
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .537
Air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Air Bag Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 353
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 541
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .362, 364
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 360, 539
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Alarm
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
INDEX 609
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 557 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 556
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 584 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .401
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .23
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .345, 353, 360 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 10
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395, 557 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 587 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
610 INDEX
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Caps, Filler
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 463
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414, 553 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 587 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 414 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .529
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .94 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 581 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 579 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
INDEX 611
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .86 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .550
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .85 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .80 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .76 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 551
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Cleaning Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .548, 584, 585
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Connector Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 566 10
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .342
612 INDEX
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .284, 286 Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .32
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Driver Information Display
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 273
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 273
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Driving
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Disposal Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
INDEX 613
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527, 528
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .567 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 585
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .167, 172 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 463
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Emergency, In Case of Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 584, 585
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 584
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .529 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 10
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
614 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 463 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 544 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Filters Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 541 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 585 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 152, 255 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .585
INDEX 615
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 255 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .225, 231
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Gauges
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 585 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 473
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 473
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Hazard 10
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
616 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .153
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Hitches
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .153 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 160 Ignition
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 254, 255
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .158
INDEX 617
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 295, 316
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .33, 295, 316
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .17, 23 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .17, 23 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 10
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 389 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
618 INDEX
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 579 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 146 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70, 97, 255 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 255
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 414 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .255
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .157
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 153 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .424 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 223
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 255 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 582 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 581
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .255
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 160 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .255, 453
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 255 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 152, 255
INDEX 619
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .255, 530
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .255 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470, 472
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 10
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 MOPAR® Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 603
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
620 INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 584
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 585 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 533, 585 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 604
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 585 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 584 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
INDEX 621
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Programmable Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284, 286
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .434
Power Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .550
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .237 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Pretensioners Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 10
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
622 INDEX
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Remote Control Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .17, 23 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .17, 23 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .343 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Remote Starting Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .297, 319 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297, 319 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
INDEX 623
Seat Belt Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .55 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 96 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .52 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 47, 50 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 10
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
624 INDEX
SENTRY KEY Specifications
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 172
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 388
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .255 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Steering
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 152, 255 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 446, 492 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
INDEX 625
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .343 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 438, 605
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 579 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .58 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 494
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .353, 360 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 10
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .433, 434 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 438
626 INDEX
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 587
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Transmission
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 395, 555
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 587
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .485 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
INDEX 627
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .342
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 43 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 255 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 470, 472
Uconnect® Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . .297, 319 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 579
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 297, 319 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 22, 31 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .33, 295, 316 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .255
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .33, 295, 316 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 10
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295, 316 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
628 INDEX
Washer Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 544 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Water Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 159
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 236 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
2015 Charger
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Charger
FCA US LLC
15D481-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2015 Dodge Charger Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Dodge Charger Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Dodge Charger Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Charger

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 8

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Emergency Key Removal Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter

Door Lock Knob

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Window Lockout Switch

Trunk Release Button

Trunk Emergency Release

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

Tether Strap Anchorages

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Rear Detection Zones BSM Warning Light

Rear Cross Path

Power Seat Switches

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

Folded Rear Seatback

Safety Catch Lever Location

Hood Release Lever

Fog Light Switch

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example